Introduction 8
Child Safety 17
Child seats ...........................................19
Child seat positioning ...................................19
Booster seats .........................................21
Installing child seats with lap and shoulder belts................24
Installing child safety seats with lower anchors and tethers for
children.............................................28
Installing child safety seats with tether straps..................31
Child safety locks ......................................34
Safety Belts 35
Fastening the safety belts ................................37
Safety belt height adjustment .............................40
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................41
Safety belt-minder .....................................42
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................44
Personal Safety System 45
Supplementary Restraints System 46
Driver and passenger airbags..............................48
Front passenger sensing system............................50
Side airbags ..........................................52
Safety canopy curtain airbags .............................54
Crash sensors and airbag indicator..........................55
Airbag disposal ........................................63
Keys and Remote Control 64
General information on radio frequencies .....................64
Remote control........................................65
Locks 68
Locking and unlocking ..................................68
Trunk release .........................................71
Interior luggage compartment release .......................72
Table of Contents 1
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Security 74
Steering Wheel 75
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................75
Steering wheel controls..................................76
Pedals 78
Adjustable pedals ......................................78
Wipers and Washers 79
Windshield wipers......................................79
Windshield washers.....................................79
Rear-window wiper and washer ............................80
Lighting 81
Lighting control .......................................81
Instrument lighting dimmer ...............................84
Daytime running lamps ..................................85
Directionindicators ....................................85
Interior lamps.........................................86
Windows and Mirrors 89
Power windows .......................................89
Exteriormirrors.......................................91
Interiormirrors........................................93
Sun visors ...........................................93
Instrument Cluster 94
Gauges..............................................95
Warning lamps and indicators .............................95
Audible warnings and indicators ...........................99
Information Displays 100
Controls ............................................100
Trip computer........................................102
Information messages ..................................103
2 Table of Contents
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Audio System 110
MyFord™ system .....................................112
Auxiliary input jack....................................116
USBport...........................................117
Climate Control 118
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................118
Rear window defroster .................................119
Cabin air filter .......................................120
Seats 121
Sitting in the correct position ............................121
Head restraints .......................................122
Front manual seats ....................................123
Front power seats.....................................124
Rear seats ..........................................125
Auxiliary Power Points 127
Storage Compartments 128
Center console .......................................128
Overhead console .....................................129
Starting and Stopping the Engine 130
Ignition switch .......................................131
Starting the engine ....................................131
Engine block heater ...................................133
Fuel and Refueling 135
Fuel quality .........................................136
Running out of fuel ....................................137
Refueling...........................................138
Fuel consumption .....................................140
Transmission 144
Automatic transmission .................................144
Table of Contents 3
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
All-Wheel Drive 146
All wheel drive .......................................146
Brakes 153
Brakes .............................................153
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................154
Parking brake ........................................154
Traction Control 155
TractionControl™ ....................................155
Stability Control 156
AdvanceTrac威 ........................................157
Parking Aids 158
Sensing system .......................................158
Rear-view camera system ...............................160
Cruise Control 163
Using cruise control ...................................163
Driving Aids 165
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) .............................................165
Steering............................................170
Load Carrying 172
Cargo management system ..............................172
Roof racks and load carriers .............................173
Vehicle loading .......................................174
Towing 182
Trailertowing........................................182
Wrecker towing.......................................185
Recreational towing....................................186
Driving Hints 188
Economical driving ....................................188
Floormats..........................................190
4 Table of Contents
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies 192
Getting roadside assistance ..............................192
Hazard warning flashers ................................193
Fuel cut-off switch ....................................194
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................194
Customer Assistance 197
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)........................204
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................204
Fuses 205
Changing a fuse ......................................205
Fuses and relays ......................................205
Fuse specification chart.................................206
Maintenance 215
General information ...................................215
Opening and closing the hood ............................216
Under hood overview ..................................218
Engine oil dipstick ....................................221
Engine oil check ......................................221
Engine coolant check ..................................222
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................227
Brake fluid check .....................................229
Power steering fluid check ..............................229
Fuel filter ...........................................229
Washer fluid check ....................................230
Changing the vehicle battery .............................230
Checking the wiper blades...............................232
Changing the wiper blades...............................232
Air filter(s)..........................................233
Adjusting the headlamps ................................235
Changing a bulb ......................................237
Bulb specification chart.................................246
Table of Contents 5
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care 248
Cleaning products .....................................248
Cleaning the exterior...................................248
Waxing.............................................250
Repairing minor paint damage ............................250
Cleaning the engine ...................................250
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................251
Cleaning the interior ...................................251
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......252
Cleaning leather seats ..................................253
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................253
Vehicle storage .......................................254
Wheels and Tires 257
Tire care ...........................................260
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....................278
Changing a road wheel .................................283
Technical specifications .................................291
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................291
Capacities and Specifications 292
Engine specifications...................................292
Part numbers........................................297
Vehicle identification number.............................298
Vehicle certification label................................299
Transmission code designation ............................299
Ford Extended Service Plan 300
Scheduled Maintenance 304
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................309
6 Table of Contents
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC姞 323
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................328
911 Assist™ .........................................344
Vehicle Health Report ..................................346
Appendices 368
Index 376
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2011
Table of Contents 7
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using
and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle.. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
8 Introduction
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symbols in this manual
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
Symbols on your vehicle
When you see these symbols, read and follow the relevant
instructions in this manual before touching or attempting
adjustment of any kind.
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
Introduction 9
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise
control
Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
10 Introduction
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威 chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威
supplement for more information.
Introduction 13
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, safety
belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate
material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for more
information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as
help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access Account
Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
14 Introduction
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate your vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment
to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Introduction 15
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16 Introduction
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child
height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Child Safety 17
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants
or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Use a child safety
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler
seat).
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer).
Use a
belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a belt-positioning
booster seat (generally children who
are at least 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint
manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
across the hips,
shoulder belt
centered across the
shoulder and chest,
and seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
18 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for Infants,
toddlers or children weighing 40 lb
(18 kg) or less (generally age four
or younger)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine
if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight,
or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and
warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the
instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer. A
safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for
your child’s height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may
increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
Child Safety 19
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be
necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See the Seats chapter for
information on head restraints.
20 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg)
and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet
9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap/shoulder
belt.
Child Safety 21
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
22 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Child Safety 23
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS WITH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• For second row seating positions, if needed, the recliner may be
adjusted slightly to improve child seat fit. If needed the head restraints
may be removed.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5.
This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
24 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the ’Lock-off’ device.
In some instances these devices have been provided only for use in
vehicles with safety belt systems that would otherwise require a locking
clip. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position,
do the following:
Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together behind the belt
tongue.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
Child Safety 25
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SAFETY SEATS WITH Lower Anchors AND
Tethers FOR CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.
28 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use) (utility vehicles)
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 11 in. (28 cm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the second row bench seats are
spaced 20.5 inches (52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 in. (28 cm) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
30 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sedan
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
32 Child Safety
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Utility
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position:
3. Clip the tether hook to the
anchor as shown.
The tether hook may be twisted 1/2 turn to improve installation. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child Safety 33
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Safety Belts 35
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
• Retractor and anchor pretensioner at the front outboard seating
positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. Refer to Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in
the Supplemental Restraint System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s
body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety
belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated
alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
36 Safety Belts
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
When in use, the rear safety belts
should be placed in the belt guides
on the outboard seatbacks.
Safety Belts 37
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belt. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
38 Safety Belts
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the front
outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. Refer to the Child Safety chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
Safety Belts 39
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
Front seats
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
• Sedan
40 Safety Belts
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER姞
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s or front passenger’s seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder威 feature for
objects placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to
large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have expired (warnings for approximately
five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder威 feature.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
42 Safety Belts
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If... Then...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
Deactivating/Activating the Belt-Minder姞 Feature
WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted
and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. To reduce
the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the system while driving
the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warning are deactivated/activated
independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not
buckle the other position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The system can be deactivated/activated by performing the following
procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set.
• the gearshift is in P (Park).
• the ignition is off.
• the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one
minute).
• Once the next step is started, the procedure must be completed within
60 seconds.
Safety Belts 43
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt four times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will flash for three times as
a confirmation
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
enabled.
• This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Cleaning the Interior in
the Vehicle Care chapter.
44 Safety Belts
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off/on indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module. During a crash, the
Restraints Control Module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
Personal Safety System 45
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result
from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a
result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags
must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or the safety belt
pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button is pressed on the remote entry transmitter, or
• the vehicle runs out of power.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator
later in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in.
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Knee airbag system (passenger’s side only – if equipped)
The knee airbag is located under the instrument panel. The system
works along with the passenger’s front airbag to help reduce injury to the
legs. When the passenger’s airbag activates in a collision, the knee airbag
deploys from under the instrument panel.
As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s
seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant
and determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which will illuminate
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled)
or OFF (disabled). The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack
of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on
to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat
is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator
will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the vehicle off, remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator
Passenger Airbag
Empty
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Child
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Adult
OFF: Unlit
Enabled
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is
illuminated, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
In case there is a problem with the front passenger sensing
system, the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster will
stay lit.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Getting the
services you need section of the Customer Assistance chapter, or see
your authorized dealer.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats),
or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating
that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the seatback of
the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system
Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY CANOPY姞 CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and curtain airbag is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags
(including the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the curtain
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side collisions or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact collisions and rollover events.
54 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The system consists of the
following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags
fitted above the trim panels over
the front and rear side windows
identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
The vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM) which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy威. Based on the
type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
Supplementary Restraints System 55
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Airbags and Police Equipment
Dual driver/passenger airbags, side airbags and knee airbags affect the
way police equipment can be mounted in police vehicles.
Any surfaces that could come into contact with an airbag, once it has
deployed, must not damage the airbag or alter its deployment path.
Once the airbag has fully deployed, any peripheral equipment surfaces
that could come into contact with the airbag (such as when the airbag
deflates with the loading of an occupant) must not damage the airbag or
alter its deployment path. Sharp edges, corners or protrusions could
damage the nylon airbag material and reduce the effectiveness of the
airbag.
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment in front of
the airbag module cover or in front of the seat areas that may
come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Dash, tunnel or console-mounted equipment should
not be placed outside of the specified zone. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not mount equipment between the side of front
seat to the door trim to block deployment of the side airbag.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Some approximate dimensions for airbags, at full inflation, are provided
in Figures 1 through 5. These dimensions are somewhat flexible and
represent free form deployments without the loading of occupants. The
shaded areas in Figures 6 through 8 represent available police equipment
mounting zones. These zones are shown for police vehicles equipped
with standard bucket seats. The zone dimensions provided in Figures 6
through 8 are approximate and will vary with the loading of occupants in
the seats.
Supplementary Restraints System 57
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
All airbag and equipment mounting zone dimensions are approximate due
to different airbag deployment characteristics.
No equipment will mount between the side of the front seat and the door
trim to block deployment of the side airbag.
Figure 1 - Sedan
Figure 1 - Utility
1. Sedan: 13 inches (330 mm) from center of emblem; utility:
9.5 inches (240 mm) from center of emblem
2. Sedan: 13.2 inches (335 mm) from center of airbag door; utility:
13.8 inches (350 mm) from center of airbag door
3. Sedan: 29.5 inches (750 mm); utility: 28.3 inches (720 mm)
No objects should be placed between the airbags due to airbag variability.
2
1
3
2
1
3
58 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Figure 2
1. Sedan: 29.9 inches (760 mm); utility: 27.5 inches (700 mm)
Figure 3
Note: No objects should be placed between the driver side steering
wheel airbag and the passenger side dash airbag.
1. Front passenger airbag – sedan: 27.5 inches (700 mm); utility:
22.8 inches (580 mm)
2. Front driver – 17 inches (430 mm)
Figure 4 (if equipped)
1. From outboard side of seat – sedan: 6 inches (152 mm); utility:
8 inches (200 mm)
2. Forward of seat back – sedan: 14 inches (356 mm); utility: 15 inches
(380 mm)
Supplementary Restraints System 59
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Figure 5 (if equipped)
WARNING: The partition and the installation hardware of the
partition must not interfere with the operation and deployment of
the roll over curtain air bags and seat side air bags. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause personal injury.
3. Up from side airbag module – sedan: 16 inches (406 mm); utility:
27.5 inches (700 mm)
Figure 6 - Sedan
60 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Figure 6 - Utility
1. Area on top of the instrument panel (Note: Equipment must not
interfere with driver visibility)
2. Airbag door must be kept clear for deployment of the airbag
3. Sedan: Area in front of electronic finish panel from the bottom of the
ashtray to the top of the instrument panel; utility: Area in front of
center console from the bottom of the ashtray to the top of the
instrument panel
4. Utility: Area in front of electronic finish panel from the bottom to the
top of the instrument panel
1
2
34
Supplementary Restraints System 61
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Figure 8
1. Area on top of the instrument panel.
Note: Equipment must not interfere
with driver visibility.
2. Area on tunnel between seats
3. 9 inches (229 mm)
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Supplementary Restraints System 63
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Keys with the keyed alike feature (if equipped) allow:
• Use of different keys (keyed alike) for a specific vehicle.
• Key lock/unlock operation of the front doors and trunk/liftgate.
The remote control (if equipped) allows you to:
• Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors.
• Remotely open the trunk (sedan only).
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft system (if equipped).
• Activate the panic alarm.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
The remote control complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
64 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take all remote entry transmitters
with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the
problem.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. Note:
Do not take the rubber cover and
circuit board off the front housing of
the remote entry transmitter.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter
batteries.
PLACE BATTERY
ON OTHER HALF
DO NOT TOUCH
THE TERMINALS
Keys and Remote Control 65
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all remote
entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four) available
before beginning this procedure. Note: Do not press the brake pedal at
any time during this procedure. If the brake pedal is pressed at any time
during this procedure, programming mode will be exited and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not pressed during this sequence.
To reprogram the remote entry transmitters:
1. Make sure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the off and on
positions. Note: The eighth turn must end in the on position.
4. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
6. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
7. Repeat Step 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
66 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power door locks (if equipped)
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Hidden rear door locks (if equipped)
The rear doors can be manually locked/unlocked using the hidden lock
knob on the inside front edge of the rear doors. Open the front doors to
access the lock knob.
Pull the knob to unlock and push the knob to lock.
Sedan
Utility
68 Locks
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Remote Control
The remote control can be used any time the vehicle is not running.
Note: If equipped with Dark Car feature, the turn signals will not flash
and the horn will not sound when unlocking or locking the vehicle.
Unlocking the doors (two-stage unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed.
Locking the doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors and the liftgate/trunk are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate/trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not
closed on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm, the horn will chirp
twice and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the trunk (sedan only)
Press the button twice within three seconds to open the trunk.
Make sure the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver’s rear
view.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all
the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding
you that your key is still in the ignition.
Locks 69
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Open the liftgate using the outside button if the vehicle is unlocked or
use the key when the vehicle is locked.
Outside button: Press the button
located in the top of the liftgate pull
cup handle to unlatch the liftgate,
then pull on the outside handle.
Key: Insert the key into the key
cylinder and turn clockwise. Hold in
this position and pull on the liftgate
handle to open the liftgate.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE (SEDAN)
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked
and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of
escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage
compartment.
72 Locks
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of
the release handle.
The handle is located inside the
luggage compartment either on the
luggage compartment door (lid) or
near the tail lamps. It is composed
of a material that will glow for hours
in darkness following brief exposure
to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the
luggage compartment door (lid) to
open from within the luggage
compartment.
Locks 73
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key or the remote control.
The park and turn lamps will flash and the horn will sound if
unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential
alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control.
• Turn the ignition on or start the vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, then turn the
ignition on within 12 seconds.
74 Security
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting In the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
Note: The telescope adjustment
feature is only available on the
sedan.
3. Lock the steering column.
Steering Wheel 75
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Refer to the Information Displays
chapter for more information.
Cluster display control features
This control functions the same as
the center control on the faceplate.
Refer to the Audio System chapter.
CONFIGURABLE STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
The steering wheel controls can be
configured to operate frequently
used equipment. A graphic in the
information display will show when
an auxiliary switch is activated.
A
U
X
AU
X
3
4
2
1
Steering Wheel 77
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
A. Farther
B. Closer
The control is located on the left side of the steering column. Press and
hold the appropriate control to move the pedals.
The pedals should only be adjusted when the vehicle is parked.
A B
78 Pedals
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.
Speed Dependent Wipers (Utility Only)
The wiper speed will adjust with the vehicle speed when intermittent
wipe is selected. A faster vehicle speed will result in a shorter time
between wipes.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
Wipers and Washers 79
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR-WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS (UTILITY ONLY)
Rotate the control to the desired
position. Select:
2 — Intermittent operation
(shortest pause between wipes).
1 — Intermittent operation (longest
pause between wipes).
0 — Off.
Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to
activate the rear washer. The control will return to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
The rear wiper will automatically turn on to intermittent when you shift
into R (Reverse) if the front wipers are activated. This feature may be
enabled or disabled in the information display.
80 Wipers and Washers
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
Sedan
Utility
A. Off
B. Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
C. Headlamps
P
A
B C
Lighting 81
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
High Beams
Sedan
Utility
• Push the lever toward the instrument panel to switch the high beams
on.
• Push the lever toward the instrument panel again or pull the lever
towards you to switch the high beams off.
82 Lighting
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Headlamp Flasher
Sedan
Utility
Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate.
SPOT LIGHT CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
• Use the switch on the chrome
handle to turn the spot light on
and off.
• Rotate and twist the handle to
adjust the position of the spot
light.
Lighting 83
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Sedan
• Press repeatedly or press and
hold until the desired level is
reached.
• If the vehicle is not equipped
with the Dark Car feature, press
and hold the top of the control to
the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This will turn
on the interior courtesy lights. Press and hold the bottom of the
control to turn off the interior courtesy lights.
• If equipped with the Dark Car feature, courtesy illumination is
disabled. Press and hold the bottom of the control to turn off the
instrument cluster lights and the information display lights.
Utility
• Press repeatedly or press and
hold the top control to brighten
the instrument cluster and
information display lighting.
• Press repeatedly or press and
hold the bottom control to dim
the instrument cluster and
information display lighting. If
equipped with the Dark Car
feature, you may turn off the
instrument cluster and
information display lighting.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer will set the illuminated components to the
maximum setting automatically.
84 Lighting
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk
or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position and
• the lighting control is in the off, autolamp or parking lamp position.
• the transmission is not in P (Park).
DIRECTION INDICATORS
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated.
Sedan
Utility
• Push down to activate the left turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn signal.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash
only three times to indicate a lane change.
Lighting 85
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome Lamp Control (Utility)
Press the control to switch on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights will remain on until
the control is pressed again.
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
The front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is activated
(Utility).
• the instrument panel dimmer button is pressed until the courtesy lamp
comes on (Sedan).
• the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
To manually turn on the map lamps, press the outer edge of the clear
lens.
Note: If equipped with Dark Car feature, courtesy illumination is
disabled.
86 Lighting
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Rear Dome Task Lamp (If Equipped)
The police vehicle may be equipped with a red/white dome lamp located
in the headliner at the rear of the vehicle. The lamp provides either
white or night-vision red options. .
• Position one is used for white
light mode.
• Position two is used for
night-vision red mode.
Note: Always remember to return the dome lamp switch to the OFF
(center) position when finished to prevent discharging the vehicle
battery.
88 Lighting
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press or lift the switches to operate
the windows.
• Press the switch to the first
detent and hold to open the
window.
• Lift the switch to the first detent
and hold to close the window.
Rear Window Buffeting
You may hear a wind throb or buffeting noise when one or both of the
rear windows are open. This noise can be reduced by lowering a front
window approximately 2–3 inches (5–8 centimeters).
One-touch down (driver’s window, utility only)
This feature automatically opens the window.
Press the switch completely down and release. The window will open
fully. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
One-touch up or down (driver’s window, sedan only)
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
AUTO
Windows and Mirrors 89
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
Window lock
Press the control to lock or unlock
the rear window controls (if
equipped).
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you turn the
ignition off, or until either front door is opened.
90 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left mirror
B. Adjustment control
C. Right mirror
1. Press the button to select the mirror you want to adjust. An indicator
light on the button will illuminate.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror button again to deselect the mirror. The indicator
light will turn off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped, Sedan Only)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog when
the rear window defrost is activated.
Windows and Mirrors 91
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
The approaching vehicle’s image is
small and near the inboard edge of
the main mirror when it is at a
distance. The image becomes larger
and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). Its image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B).
The vehicle will transition to your
peripheral field of view as it leaves
the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS姞) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) (If Equipped)
Refer to Blind Spot Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA) in the Driving Aids chapter.
A
B
C
92 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Slide-On-Rod
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Retract the visor before moving it
back toward the windshield and
storing it.
Windows and Mirrors 93
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Sedan cluster shown in standard measure – optional and metric clusters
similar.
Utility cluster shown in standard measure – optional and metric clusters
similar.
A. Tachometer
B. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
C. Speedometer
D. Fuel gauge
A
D
CB
A
D
B
C
94 Instrument Cluster
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Speedometer
The vehicle is shipped with a certified speedometer. If your local
procedures require calibration, utilize the distance per time on-road test.
If a dynamometer calibration is required, reference the calibration
procedure found at www.Fleet.Ford.com or check OASIS for updated
information.
Fuel gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
These indicators can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become
serious enough to cause expensive repairs. Many lights will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any light remains
on after starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light
for additional information.
Note: Some warning indicators are reconfigurable telltales (RTT). These
indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a
warning light, but do not display on startup.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Airbag readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
continues to flash or remains on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Instrument Cluster 95
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-lock brake system
If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash, a
malfunction has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the
brake warning light also is illuminated.
Brake system warning light
To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on
position when the engine is not running, or in a position
between on and start, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition
is turned to the on position.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Charging system (RTT)
Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Door ajar (RTT)
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
96 Instrument Cluster
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine oil pressure (RTT)
Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range.
Engine coolant temperature (RTT)
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
High beams
Illuminates when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Low fuel (RTT)
Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty.
Low tire pressure warning
Illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the light remains
on at start up or while driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn on or begins to flash, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Low washer fluid (RTT)
Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Park lamps
Illuminates when the park lamps are on.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced power (RTT)
Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD/4WD fault has been
detected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Instrument Cluster 97
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt
Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威 chime
will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt.
Service engine soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Speed control (if equipped) (RTT)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system is in:
• On (gray light): Illuminates when the speed control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
• Engaged (white light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
98 Instrument Cluster
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Turn signal
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver’s door is
opened (if equipped).
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Instrument Cluster 99
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Menu
You can access the menus using the information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the
items are optional for sedan and utility.
†Trip1/2
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Total Odometer (located in lower right of display). Note: this will also
display in other menus.
†See Trip computer later in this section for more information.
†Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel
†See Trip computer later in this section for more information.
Information
Coolant Temp. — The engine coolant indicator will change colors
indicating: blue for cool, gray for normal and red for hot. If the engine
coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Settings
Driver Assist Traction Ctrl
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic
Rear Park Aid
Display Language English, Español or Français
Units Distance Miles and Gal.
or Km and
Liters
Temperature Fahrenheit (°F)
or Celsius (°C)
Information Displays 101
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Settings
Convenience DTE Calculation Normal or Towing
Locks Remote Unlock All Doors or
Driver First
Oil life Reset Set XXX%
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
Reverse Wiper
System Reset Hold OK to Reset to Factory Default
System Check
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
Engine hour meter and idle hours are also displayed in the system
check.
Trip Computer
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip,
distance, time and fuel information.
Trip Odometer
Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
Distance to E
Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to
vary.
Inst Fuel Econ
Shows instantaneous fuel usage.
Average fuel
Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
Fuel Used
Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
Total Odometer
Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
102 Information Displays
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AWD Messages Action / Description
AWD Off Displayed when the system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself. This is
caused by operating the vehicle with the
compact spare tire installed or if the system is
overheating. The system will resume normal
function and clear this message after cycling
the ignition on and off and driving a short
distance with the road tire re-installed or after
the system is allowed to cool.
Check AWD Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain
malfunction/reduced power light when the
system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Change AWD Power
Transfer Unit Lube
Displayed when the system needs its power
transfer unit lubrication changed. This
message may be set if the vehicle has
experienced extended periods of
extreme/severe duty cycle driving.
104 Information Displays
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Battery and
Charging System
Messages
Action / Description
Check Charging
System
Displayed when the charging system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Turn Power Off to
Save Battery
Displayed when the battery management
system determines that:
• the battery is at a low state of charge or,
• the ignition has been in accessory position
or on position with the engine off for
approximately 45 minutes.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to
protect the battery. This message will clear
once the vehicle has been started and the
battery state of charge has recovered. Turning
off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Transport Mode
Contact Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Low Battery Features
Tempor. Turned Off
Displayed when the battery management
system detects an extended low-voltage
condition. Various vehicle features will be
disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off
as many of the electrical loads as soon as
possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
Information Displays 105
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
Power Steering Assist
Fault
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
Check Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Check Rear Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the rear park aid status.
Passenger Sensing
System Messages
Action / Description
Remove Objects Near
Passenger Seat
Displayed when objects are by the passenger
seat. After the objects are moved away from
the seat, if the warning stays on or continues
to come on contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
108 Information Displays
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reminder Messages Action / Description
Steering Lock Turn
Wheel to Unlock
Displays when you need to turn the steering
wheel in order to disengage the steering lock.
Shift to Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Tire Messages Action / Description
Low Tire Pressure Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions, refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Wheels and tires chapter. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Information Displays 109
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance/Strength The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result the audio
system muting.
CD/CD Player Information
Note: CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function
correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Note: CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only, wiping from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
110 Audio System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files are played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in
the current folder.
Audio System 111
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
G. OK Allows you to confirm commands with special
phone and media features. If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC, refer to the SYNC
chapter for more information.
H. Eject Eject the CD.
I. Power and Volume Press the power control to turn the system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
J. CLOCK Set the time. Use the center arrow controls to
move between options and set time.
K. SOUND Allows you to adjust the sound settings
(Treble, Bass, Middle, Fade and Balance).
1. Press Menu.
2. Scroll until Audio is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select Sound and press OK.
L. MENU Allows you to access many functions of the
audio system. Refer to Menu structure
following this table.
M. PHONE Access SYNC phone features.
N. AUX Access your auxiliary input jack. Refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
O. SIRIUS Access SIRIUS satellite radio features.
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly
different, not at all or on-screen and able to be selected using the
function buttons.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options (if
active).
Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a
menu.
114 Audio System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Menu structure
Radio Scan
Set category Rock
Pop
Country, etc.
RBDS/RDS
SIRIUS options Scan
Show ESN
Channel guide Tune channel
Skip channel
Lock channel
Set category
Alerts
Unlock all stations
Skip no stations
Parental lock (PIN)
Audio settings Speed Compensated Volume level
Sound
Occupancy mode
CD Scan all
Scan folder
CD compression
Clock settings Set time
Set date
24h mode
Display settings Dimming Automatic
Daylight
Language English
French
Spanish
Temp setting Fahrenheit
Celsius
Audio System 115
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
The auxiliary input jack (AIJ) allows you to connect and play music from
your portable music player through the vehicle speakers. You can use any
portable music player designed for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm) connectors at each end.
1. Make sure the vehicle, radio and portable music player are turned off
and the vehicle is in P (Park).
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the AIJ.
3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn on your portable music player and adjust its volume to 1/2.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You should
hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
116 Audio System
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks
and charge devices (if supported). Refer to the SYNC威 material for more
information.
On sedan models, it is located on
the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not use a memory stick that would present a
sharp edge rearward in the vehicle where it may have potential to
damage a deploying passenger airbag.
On utility models, it is located in the center console or lower center of
the instrument panel.
Audio System 117
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A. Power: Press the button to turn the system on and off. When the
system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
B. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and de-mister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.
C. A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. Air
conditioning cools the vehicle using outside air. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes.
118 Climate Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
D. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
E. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
F. Front temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air
circulated in the front of your vehicle. Turn to select the desired
temperature.
G. Rear fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
rear your vehicle. Press + or - to select the desired fan speed.
H. Rear temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air
circulated in the rear of your vehicle. Press TEMP + and TEMP - to
select the desired temperature.
I. REAR CTRL: This is a non-functional control. The rear climate
controls system can only be controlled from the front.
J. Rear climate control system power: Press the button to turn the
turn the rear climate control system on and off.
K. Front fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you
switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
L. Rear defrost: Turns the heated rear window on and off. Refer to
Heated rear window later in this chapter for more information.
M. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
de-mister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Note: The ignition must be on to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 10 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after 10 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
Climate Control 119
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CABIN AIR FILTER
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in
front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the
concentration of airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the
air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration
system gives the following benefits to customers:
• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits
For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace
the cabin air filter, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance chapter.
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an
authorized dealer.
120 Climate Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system,
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a collision.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 mm) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
Seats 121
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Before adjusting any head restraint, adjust the seatback to an
upright driving/riding position. Properly adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
Front seat head restraints
The head restraints consist of:
A. Energy absorbing head restraint
B. Steel stems
C. Guide sleeve adjust/release button
D. Guide sleeve unlock/remove button
• Raise: Pull up on the head restraint (A).
• Lower: Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust/release button (C) and
push down on the head restraint (A).
122 Seats
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Remove: Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest
adjustment position. Insert and push a tool, such as a large paper clip,
into the pin hole located on the side of the guide sleeve adjust/release
button (D) and press the guide sleeve adjust/release button (C), then
pull the head restraint upward.
• Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the
head restraint down until it locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (if equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To
tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding
position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head
to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position.
FRONT MANUAL SEATS
Recline adjustment
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Seats 123
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Moving the seats backwards and forwards
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver’s seat or seatback while the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backwards and forwards after
releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Lumbar adjustment (if equipped)
FRONT POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
124 Seats
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fold-flat seatback (if equipped)
Lift the handle and fold the seatback forward until it is flat.
Note: For the bench seats, make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled
before folding the seatback.
Lift the seatback toward the rear of
the vehicle until you hear a click.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
126 Seats
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts
DC/180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• on the instrument panel
• inside the center console storage compartment
• on the rear of the center console (utility only).
Auxiliary Power Points 127
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Sedan
A. Cupholders
B. Utility compartment
Utility
A. Cupholders
B. Utility storage compartment with
powerpoint
C. Auxiliary AV connections, USB
ports and powerpoint (if equipped)
Console Mounting Plates
The mounting plates should only be removed and replaced during the
upfitting process. They should not be removed permanently.
Universal Top Tray
The trim on the top of the instrument panel can be removed to aid in
upfitting aftermarket accessories or mounting equipment.
B
C
A
128 Storage Compartments
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your
option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.
Storage Compartments 129
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 km) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting your engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
130 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH
A. Off - the ignition is off. Note: In
order to switch off the engine while
the vehicle is in motion, shift to
neutral and use the brakes to bring
the vehicle to a safe stop. After the
vehicle has stopped, turn the engine
off and shift into park. Then, turn
the key to the accessory or off
position.
B. Accessory - allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
C. On - all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
D. Start - cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
• Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).
• Turn the key to on without turning the key to start.
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
3. Turn the key to start the engine. The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, wait for a short period
of time and try again.
C
D
B
A
Starting and Stopping the Engine 131
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13
o
F (-25
o
C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this flooded engine procedure.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E-85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E-85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E-85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E-85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
E-85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Preceding Instructions
(Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
132 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 133
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure the vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It will achieve maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. If you use the heater longer
than three hours, this will not improve system performance and will use
unnecessary electricity.
134 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel
system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not
be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Fuel and Refueling 135
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Easy Fuel姞 “No Cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pressing the center of the door about one
inch from the door’s rear edge.
3. Insert the fuel plug key (if equipped) into the locking plug and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
5. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
6. Reinstall the plug (if equipped) into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key
clockwise to lock.
Note: Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter for more information.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to close
properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.
Fuel and Refueling 139
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,200 km–4,800
km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
140 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted
Fuel and Refueling 141
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the
Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized
dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel威
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
142 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 143
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel
usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as
a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
144 Transmission
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
L (Low Gear)
The low button is located at the end
of the column shifter.
• Provides maximum engine
braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest
available gear for the current
vehicle speed; allows for first gear
when vehicle reaches lower
speeds.
• Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
Automatic transmission adaptive learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will
not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
LOW
G
E
A
R
Transmission 145
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
148 All-Wheel Drive
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. After the system has
cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When driving at slow
speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use L (Low) gear
when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
All-Wheel Drive 149
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating drive shafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating drive shafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and PTU
(power transfer unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest
Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger
lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever
driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive
over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down.
150 All-Wheel Drive
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power
will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application and
brake overheating. Do not descend in
neutral; instead, disengage overdrive
or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to
be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
All-Wheel Drive 151
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter for
wheel cleaning instructions.
This vehicle is equipped with heavy-duty front disc brake pads to meet
the varying demands of different police service for fade resistance and
other performance requirements.
Police pursuits involving hard braking in high temperatures in the brake
system and potential accelerated component wear. Ford recommends
brake system inspection and maintenance according to service manual
procedures following high speed pursuits with heavy brake usage.
Refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to P
(Park) and apply the parking brake, and then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the
rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can
reduce stopping distances in critical situations.
Brakes 153
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The ABS lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start up,
remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need
to be serviced.
If the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released,
have your brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangers inherent when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down to its
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down again.
154 Brakes
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or mud), turning the traction
control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full
engine power.
The traction control system can be turned off by using the information
display control. Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威 system, the stability control light will illuminate
steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac威 system was not manually
disabled using the information display control. If the stability control
light still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
Traction Control 155
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac威 system helps you keep control of your vehicle when
on a slippery surface. The electronic stability control (ESC) portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides. The traction control
system (TCS) helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. (For
details on TCS operation, see the Traction Control chapter.) On utility
models, the system also includes curve control which assists in vehicle
handling in following the road during adverse maneuvering and roll
stability control which helps avoid a vehicle rollover.
156 Stability Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s
accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
The system can be turned off using the information display control. Refer
to the Information Display chapter. If a fault is present in the system, a
warning message appears in the information display and does not allow
the driver to switch the faulted system on.
158 Parking Aids
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
A
Parking Aids 159
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Guidelines
Note: The guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to
your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects are
getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the
yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Rear Camera Delay
The camera image in the rear view mirror remains on for a few seconds
to assist in parking or attaching a trailer.
D
C
B
A
162 Parking Aids
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if the vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching On Cruise Control
Press the ON control up and release.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press the SET control upward and release.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.
Cruise Control 163
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
• Press SET up or down and hold to increase or decrease the set speed.
Release the control when you reach the desired speed.
• Press SET up or down and release. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press SET up and release.
Canceling a Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased.
Resuming a Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Off Cruise Control
Note: The set speed is erased when you switch off cruise control.
Press the OFF control down and release or turn off the ignition.
164 Cruise Control
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS姞) WITH CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS威 as a
replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS威 is not a
replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
BLIS威 aids the driver in detecting
vehicles that may have entered the
blind spot zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately
10 feet (3 meters) beyond the
bumper. The system alerts you if
certain vehicles enter the blind spot
zone while driving.
BLIS威 aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the
blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The system alerts you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: BLIS威 is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or
objects; or to detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure
(fences, guardrails, trees, etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone (typically
fewer than two seconds), the system does not trigger.
Driving Aids 165
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Systems
BLIS威 turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven
forward above 3 mph (5 km/h); it remains on while the transmission is in
D (Drive) and N (Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the
system enters CTA mode. Once shifted back into D (Drive), BLIS威 turns
back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: BLIS威 does not function in R (Reverse) or P (Park) or provide
any additional warning when a turn signal is on.
CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet (14 meters) away
though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked. Reversing
slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA
system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior
mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone
coverage is nearly maximized.
166 Driving Aids
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the
left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely
limited.
System Lights and Messages
The BLIS威 and CTA systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in
the outside mirror on the side of the
vehicle the approaching vehicle is
coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when the headlamp switch is not in the
off position and nighttime darkness is detected.
CTA also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own series
of tones; see the Parking Aids chapter.
Driving Aids 167
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the BLIS威
indicator illuminates and remains on and BLIND SPOT SYSTEM
FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT appears in the
information display. When problems that may cause the left or right
indicator not to illuminate, only the information display faults appear.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the
information display control; refer to the Information Display chapter.
When the BLIS威 is switched off, the driver does not receive alerts and
the information display shows BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and/or CTA
SYSTEM OFF. The system switches back on whenever the ignition is
switched on.
One or both systems can also be switched off permanently at your
authorized dealer. Once switched off, switching it back on must also be
done at the dealership. When switched off, the information display shows
BLIND SPOT DISABLED and/or CTA DISABLED.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation. When a system error is detected the following message
Service Power Steering, Service Power Steering Now or Power Steering
Assist Fault may appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostics
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected,
Power Steering Assist Fault will be displayed in the information display. If
this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine.
After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine, and
watch the information display for Power Steering Assist Fault. If the
message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer
to have it checked. With the message displayed, the steering assist is
turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.
170 Driving Aids
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The tray can be used to mount
electronic equipment. It will latch in
either the full-forward or
full-rearward position. Push down
on the levers on both sides of the
tray to release the latches and move
the tray.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS
(IF EQUIPPED, UTILITY ONLY)
WARNING: When loading the roof rail crossbars, it is
recommended to evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a
low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Note: The maximum recommended load is 100 lb (45 kg), evenly
distributed on the crossbars.
Note: Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel. The roof
panel is not designed to directly carry a load.
For proper function of the roof rack system, loads must be placed
directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your vehicle may
be equipped with factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine Accessory
crossbars, designed specifically for your vehicle, are also recommended
for use with your roof rack system.
Ensure that the load is securely fastened. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Load Carrying 173
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Load Carrying 175
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
176 Load Carrying
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Load Carrying 177
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
178 Load Carrying
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Load Carrying 179
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
180 Load Carrying
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you
have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the
vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb.
(45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x
100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Load Carrying 181
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: DO NOT tow a trailer during patrol or pursuit situations.
Sedan: Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1000 lb (454 kg)
gross trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb (45 kg).
Utility: Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 2500 lb
(1134 kg) gross trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 250 lb
(113 kg).
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance information.
For load specification terms found on the label and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
182 Towing
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle. Distribute the trailer load so 10–15% of the total trailer weight is on
the tongue.
Safety Chains
Always connect the safety chains to the vehicle’s hook retainers. To
connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow
slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the rental agency’s instructions.
Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Ensure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing-up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
Towing 183
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers) and do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) to aid in engine/transmission
cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may turn off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with the grade assist feature, use this
feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade, place
wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
184 Towing
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If the vehicle is
towed incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed from the front if proper
wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground. The
rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion.
FWD vehicles can also be towed from the rear using wheel lift
equipment; however, the front wheels need to be placed on a dolly to
prevent damage to the transmission.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles must be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment, with all the wheels off the ground, to
prevent damage to the transmission, AWD system or vehicle.
Towing 185
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
188 Driving Hints
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Drive through water in an emergency only, and not
as part of normal driving.
WARNING: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air
filter.
Note: Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
or air intake and can cause internal vehicle damage or cause it to stall.
Note: Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be
limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely
damage your engine or your vehicle
may stall.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
Driving Hints 189
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FLOOR MATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
190 Driving Hints
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
Driving Hints 191
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
192 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s information
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Getting roadside assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your battery.
Roadside Emergencies 193
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and wait ten seconds.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Preparing Your Vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm soft shifts, firm shifts or both. This operation
is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
194 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
4
2
1
3
Roadside Emergencies 195
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform
all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
Customer Assistance 197
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
198 Customer Assistance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement
vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
Customer Assistance 199
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If
a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure
outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before
an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided
and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all
findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision,
Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision
within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
200 Customer Assistance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
Customer Assistance 201
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer.
If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
202 Customer Assistance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
Customer Assistance 203
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
204 Customer Assistance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
Fuses 205
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
7 — Not used
8 — Not used
9 — Not used
10 — Trunk/liftgate release relay
11 — Rear window defroster relay,
Mirror relay (Sedan)
12 — Run/start relay
13 — Starter motor relay
14 — Engine cooling fan #2 high speed
relay
15 — Fuel pump relay
16 40A** Center console 6 way B+ feed 3
17 — Not used
18 40A** Front blower motor relay
19 30A** Starter relay
20 20A** Center console powerpoint #2
21 — Not used
22 — Not used
23 30A** Driver power seat
24 40A** Police run/start relay
25 — Not used
26 40A** Rear window defrost relay
27 20A** Center console powerpoint #1
28 — Not used
29 40A** Engine cooling fan #1 high speed
power, Engine cooling fan #1 and
#2 low speed primary fuse
30 40A** Engine cooling fan #2 high speed
fuse
31 25A** Engine cooling fan #1 and #2 low
speed secondary fuse
Fuses 207
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
32 — Auxiliary blower motor relay
(Utility)
33 — Engine cooling fan #1 and #2 low
speed relay #2
34 — Blower motor relay
35 — Engine cooling fan #1 high speed
relay, Engine cooling fan #1 and
#2 low speed relay #1
36 — Not used
37 — Not used
38 — Not used
39 40A** Auxiliary blower motor (Utility)
40 40A** Center console 6 way B+ feed 1
41 — Not used
42 30A** Passenger seat (Sedan)
43 40A** Anti-lock brake system valves
(Utility)
20A** Anti-lock brake system valves
(Sedan)
44 — Rear washer relay (Utility)
45 — Not used
46 — Not used
47 — Not used
48 — Not used
49 — Not used
50 15A* Heated mirrors
51 — Not used
52 — Not used
53 — Not used
54 — Not used
55 — Wiper relay
56 — Not used
208 Fuses
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
57 — Not used
58 10A* Alternator A-line
59 10A* Brake on/off switch
60 — Not used
61 — Not used
62 10A* Air conditioner clutch relay
63 15A* Not used (spare)
64 15A* Rear wipers (Utility)
65 30A* Fuel pump relay
66 — Powertrain control module relay
67 20A* Oxygen sensor heater, Mass
airflow sensor, Variable camshaft
timing solenoid valve, Canister
vent solenoid, Canister purge
solenoid
68 20A* Ignition coils
69 20A* Vehicle power #1 (Powertrain
control module)
70 15A* (Sedan) — Air conditioner
variable compressor control, Fan
control relay coils, Variable air
conditioning compressor,
Auxiliary transmission warmup,
Turbo charge waste-gate control,
Electronic compressor bypass
valve, All-wheel drive module,
Positive crankcase ventilation
heater
10A* (Utility) — same as above
71 — Not used
72 — Not used
73 20A* Center console run/start feed #1
74 20A* Center console run/start feed #2
Fuses 209
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
75 — Not used
76 — Not used
77 — Not used
78 — Not used
79 — Not used
80 25A* Police rear flasher / Package tray
lighting access circuit (Sedan)
81 20A* Spot lights
82 15A* Rear washer (Utility)
83 — Not used
84 20A* Not used (spare)
85 — Not used
86 7.5A* Powertrain control module
keep-alive power and relay,
Canister vent solenoid
87 5A* Run/start relay coil
88 — Run/start relay
89 5A* Front blower relay coil, Electrical
power assist steering module
90 10A* Powertrain control module
run/start
91 — Not used
92 10A* Anti-lock brake system module
93 5A* Rear window defroster relay,
Run/start relay, Trunk release
relay
94 30A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start
95 2A* Center console start feed
96 — Not used
97 — Not used
98 — Air conditioner clutch relay
*Mini Fuses **Cartridge Fuses
210 Fuses
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 30A Driver side front window, Rear
windows (Sedan)
2 15A Driver seat switch, 14 way B+
feed #1
3 30A Not used (spare)
4 10A Demand lamps battery saver relay,
Glove box lamp, Visor lamps
(Utility), Task lamp
5 20A 14 Way B+ feed #3
6 5A Not used (spare)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 33 41
42
43
44
45
34
35
36
37
23
24
25
26
27
28 38 46
39 4729
32
40
31
30
48
49
Fuses 211
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
25 15A Liftgate release (Utility)
26 5A Ignition switch (Sedan),
Frequency transceiver module
(Utility)
27 20A Not used (spare)
28 15A Ignition switch (Utility)
29 20A Radio, Global positioning system
module
30 15A Front park lamps
31 — Not used
32 15A Master window/mirror switch,
Lock switch illumination, Police
console inline delayed accessory
feed, Delayed accessory feed
33 10A Occupant classification module
(Utility)
34 10A Reverse park aid module, Blind
spot monitor module, Rear video
camera
35 5A Motorized humidity sensor,
Overdrive cancel switch (Low
gear switch feed), Column shift –
low gear, Headlamp switch
(Utility)
36 10A Not used (spare)
37 10A Restraints control module (Utility)
38 10A Auto–dimming mirror, Rear
camera display mirror
39 15A High beam headlamp shutters
40 10A Rear park lamps, License plate
lamps (Utility)
Fuses 213
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
41 7.5A Occupant classification sensor,
Restraint control module (Utility),
Brake shift interlock (Utility)
42 5A Police 4–button steering wheel
control module
43 10A Not used (spare)
44 10A Not used (spare)
45 5A Not used (spare)
46 10A Climate control module
47 15A Not used (spare)
48 30A Circuit
Breaker
Window switches
49 Relay Delayed accessory
214 Fuses
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers that
are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Maintenance 215
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine
A. Engine coolant reservoir
B. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
C. Brake fluid reservoir
D. Battery
E. Power distribution box
F. Air filter assembly
G. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
H. Engine oil dipstick
I. Engine oil filler cap
A C D
I H FG
EB
Maintenance 219
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.7L V6 engine
A. Engine coolant reservoir
B. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
C. Brake fluid reservoir
D. Battery
E. Power distribution box
F. Air filter assembly
G. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
H. Engine oil dipstick
I. Engine oil filler cap
A
I H G F
B C D E
220 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately.
Adding engine oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications for more information.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.
Maintenance 221
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the coolant level
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240E available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolant immediately.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
222 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives as
they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
•
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm
engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft威
Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with prediluted engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
•
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Maintenance 223
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted
engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
Engine fluid temperature management (EcoBoost™ engine only)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear on the message center.
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
224 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
•
the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot) area
• the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
• the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P
(Park).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area.
• The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
Maintenance 225
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot. The hot coolant is under pressure and
may cause serious burns.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
226 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
WARNING: The dipstick cap and surrounding components may
be hot; gloves are recommended.
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been operated for
an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or
pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating
temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking.
Depending on vehicle use, cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or
longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Under hood overview in this chapter for the location
of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by
turning it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Maintenance 227
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result
in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift
the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Note: Wash hands after handling.
230 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
The Motorcraft威 maintenance-free battery normally does not require
additional water during its life of service.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Maintenance 231
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to release the blade from the arm and pull
the blade away from the arm to remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
232 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the rear window wiper blade (if equipped)
To replace the rear wiper blade:
1. Press the wiper blade against the
glass with one hand and hold it.
2. Pull the wiper arm away from the
wiper blade to separate.
3. To attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm, align the slot (1) and
cross pin (2) and firmly press the
wiper arm into the wiper blade until
a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
For EcoBoost™ equipped vehicles: When servicing the air cleaner, it is
important that no foreign material enter the air induction system. The
engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
2
1
Maintenance 233
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the air filter element
3.5L V6 engine shown, 3.5L
EcoBoost™/3.7L engines similar
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the
clamps. Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are
engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing.
234 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sedan:
Utility:
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up). The horizontal edge of the brighter light
should touch the horizontal reference line.
5. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
236 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
Maintenance 237
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low/High beam bulbs (Utility)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Reach in behind the headlamp
assembly to access the bulbs and
connectors.
3. Remove service cap.
4. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise and remove
it.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb(s).
Front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs without wig-wags
(Sedan)
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Reach in behind the headlamp
assembly to access the bulb sockets
and connectors.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from the steps above.
Maintenance 239
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Front parking lamp/turn signal and sidemarker bulbs without
wig-wags (Utility)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is
in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the hood overslam bumper
tower to service park/turn or sidemarker
bulbs (if needed).
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs without wig-wags
(Utility)
1. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the lamp assembly.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb(s).
240 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing sidemarker bulbs (Utility)
1. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the lamp assembly.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb(s).
Front parking lamp/turn signal flashers (wig-wags) (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED front parking lamp/turn signal
flashers (wig-wags). It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If
replacement is required, it is recommended that you see your authorized
dealer.
Note: Use of the wig-wag feature overrides normal operation of the
park/turn indicator.
Spot lights (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spot light attached to one or both of the
A-Pillars. It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is
required, it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 241
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing stop/tail/turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs (Sedan)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the
trunk.
2. Remove the press pin and cargo net
fastener (if equipped) and carefully pull
the carpet away to expose the backside
of the tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the nut and washer
assemblies, then pull the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle.
A. Side marker lamp
B. Stop/tail/turn lamp
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pulling it
out of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
242 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing backup lamp bulbs (Sedan)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Remove the deck lid trim panel press pins
and carefully pull the panel away to expose
the backside of the backup lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb socket by rotating it
counterclockwise, then pull it out of
the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs (Sedan)
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED high-mount brake lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is
recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 243
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs (Sedan)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb out from
the contacts.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing supplemental park lamp bulbs (Sedan)
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED supplemental park lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is
recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing turn/backup lamp bulbs (Utility)
The turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same area of the tail lamp
assembly, one below the other. Follow the same steps to replace these
bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off
position, then open the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly bolts.
2. Remove the two bolts covers using a standard flat
tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the two bolts from the lamp assembly.
4. Carefully remove the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle by pulling the assembly straight out to expose
the bulb socket.
244 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
7. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts. Reinstall bolt covers.
Replacing tail/brake lamp bulbs (Utility)
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulb (Utility)
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp
located in the spoiler. It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If
replacement is required, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulb (Utility)
1. Carefully release the spring clip
(1).
2. Remove the lamp (2).
3. Remove the bulb (3).
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb.
3
2
1
Maintenance 245
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of bulbs
Trade
number
Low/high beam headlamp 2
HIR2 (Sedan)
HB3 (Utility)
Front park/turn lamp
(without wig-wag)
2
3457AK
(amber)
(Sedan)
3457K
(Utility)
* Front park/turn/wig-wag
lamp
2 LED
Sidemarker lamp (front) 2
168 (Sedan)
W5W
(Utility)
Sidemarker lamp (rear)
(Sedan)
2 168
Stop/tail/turn lamp
(Sedan)
2 3157K
* Tail/brake lamp (Utility) 2 LED
Rear turn lamp (Utility) 2
WY21W
(amber)
Backup lamp 2
921 (Sedan)
W21W
(Utility)
License plate lamp 2
C5W (Sedan)
W5W
(Utility)
246 Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Function Number of bulbs
Trade
number
* High-mount brake lamp 1 LED
* Supplemental park lamp
(Sedan)
2 LED
Front map lamp 2
W5WL
(Sedan)
168 (T10)
(Utility)
* Third row cargo lamp
(Utility)
1 LED
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lights - see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 247
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
248 Vehicle Care
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash
off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as
you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the
cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean,
dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning plastic exterior parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover.
Vehicle Care 249
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
250 Vehicle Care
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the
rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
Vehicle Care 251
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner . Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and
brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
Vehicle Care 253
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to
prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
254 Vehicle Care
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more), fuel
may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer product to
the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods
exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label. The vehicle
should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive
throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Vehicle Care 255
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
256 Vehicle Care
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s manual and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Wheels and Tires 257
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD
vehicles. Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. This feature
gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving
surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other
than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which
might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty.
With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front wheels and
distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases traction which
may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The system is active all the
time and requires no input from the operator.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive.
258 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUVs and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUVs and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
Wheels and Tires 259
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver ’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
262 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those
with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
264 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Wheels and Tires 265
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for “LT ”
Type Tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
B
C
B
D
266 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” Type Tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading section.
A
B
C
D
E
Wheels and Tires 267
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
Wheels and Tires 269
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare tire
and wheel assembly information section for description): Store and
maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see
the Dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly information section for
description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these “wear bars”,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
270 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
272 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest
safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your
safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle
seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
274 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
Utility:
• Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
• All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
Sedan:
• Front-wheel drive
(FWD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at left of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Wheels and Tires 275
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
POLICE TIRES
Wheel rims - police
To withstand the demands placed on vehicles driven under heavy duty
service conditions, Ford Motor Company installs heavy duty steel wheels.
Tires - police
Tires (including the spare) are speed-rated radials for police use. Use
only the recommended tire size and speed ratings.
In regions with snow and ice during the winter months, installation of
snow tires may be desirable. Snow tires will usually exhibit a drop in dry
pavement handling, but many show an increase in snow and ice traction.
When snow tires are used, they should be installed on all four wheels,
never on the drive wheels only.
Tires - long term storage
Most high performance tires are made with a nylon overlay.
As such, the following steps should be taken to avoid flatspotting when
the vehicles are not used for a period of time.
• Fleets should store the vehicles with 44 psi (303 kPa) in the tires.
• If the vehicle is stored for periods longer than 30 days, it should be
moved several feet at least once during each 30-day period, so that a
different portion of the tread contacts the ground.
• Tire pressure should be reduced to the recommended pressure shown
on the vehicle certification label before the vehicle is placed back into
service.
276 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and cables . If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• For police sedan, do not use snow chains or cables on this vehicle as
they may cause damage to your vehicle which may lead to loss of
vehicle control.
• For police utility, use only SAE Class S snow chains, snow cables or
equivalent on the front axle for 245/55R18 equipped vehicles. The use
of snow chains, snow cables or other traction assist devices that are
larger than SAE Class S may cause damage to your vehicle’s wheel
house, suspension and/or body.
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices on the
rear tires. This could cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house or
body.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the cables. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire cables on dry roads.
Wheels and Tires 277
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
278 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing Tires with a TPMS
Note: Each road tire and full-size
spare is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the
tire/wheel cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem.
The pressure sensor is covered by
the tire and is not visible unless the
tire is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an
authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When a new wheel and tire is installed
When one of your road tires is replaced by a new tire/wheel, the TPMS
sensor located in the new tire/wheel needs to be “trained” to the vehicle.
Wheels and Tires 279
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TPMS system training tools
The customer training tool, P/N 8C2Z-1A203-A, can be purchased from
any Ford dealer for training the system after maintenance has been
performed that requires system training. The tire pressure monitor
activation tool, P/N 204-363, is also available through the Rotunda
catalog. For either tool, follow the training instructions as outlined below.
TPMS sensor training procedure
Note: To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, TPMS
training should be performed at least three feet (one meter) away from
another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS training
procedure at the same time.
Note: Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire
sensor or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to
be repeated on all four wheels.
A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
TPMS training procedure
Note: It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before
attempting.
Note: To enter the training mode, Steps 1–6 MUST be completed within
60 seconds.
1. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
2. Press and release the brake pedal.
3. Cycle the ignition from off to on three times ending in the on position
- DO NOT start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal for two seconds, then release.
5. Turn the ignition to off - DO NOT remove the key.
6. Cycle the ignition from off to on three times ending in on - DO NOT
start the engine.
If the training mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the TPMS indicator will flash, and the information display will show
TRAIN LF TIRE.
If after repeated attempts to enter the training mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator does not flash, and the information display
does not show TRAIN LF TIRE, seek service from your authorized dealer.
280 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Training procedure
Note: It may take up to six seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor.
During this time, the tool must remain in place at the valve stem.
1. Place the tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the
on-board module.
2. Within two minutes of the horn sounding, place the tool on the RF tire
sidewall of the valve stem and press and release the test button to train
the RF tire pressure sensor.
Note: Do not wait more than two
minutes between training each
sensor or the module will time out
and the entire procedure must be
repeated.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed
after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the information display (if equipped) will show TIRE
TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with an information
display , successful completion of the training procedure will be verified
by turning the ignition switch to the off position without the horn
sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the off
position, the training procedure was not successful.
21
4 3
Wheels and Tires 281
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. Turn the lead screw (where the
lug wrench attaches) of the jack by
hand to release the wheel wrench
from the jack. Press the button on
the wrench to extend the handle.
Fold down the wrench socket.
Sedan:
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) and turn the engine off.
3. Lift the trunk cargo cover, and
remove the wing nut that secures
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Lift and remove the spare tire
from the trunk.
5. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket
by turning it counterclockwise,
remove the jack kit from the
vehicle.
6. Remove the jack and the wrench
from the felt bag. Fold down the
wrench socket to use to loosen the
lug nuts and to operate the jack.
286 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle jacking
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
3. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the
yellow warning label on the jack.
Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
4. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking
points.
5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Wheels and Tires 287
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. Refer to Wheel lug
nut torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
Stowing the spare and jack (utility)
1. Replace the wheel chock in the foam tray.
2. Adjust the jack to the proper
height to install the wrench. Turn
the jack lead screw until the arrow
on the upper link is slightly below
the circle indicator shown on the
lower link.
Push the button (A) to retract the
wrench handle and place the
wrench over the raised tab on the
lower link and drop the tang (B)
through the hole in the diagonally
opposite upper link. Turn lead screw
of jack clockwise until the arrow
aligns with the circle indicator to
secure the wrench onto the jack.
A
B
288 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Place the jack in the foam tray and secure it with the attached strap.
4. Place the foam tray over the mounting bracket on the floor of the
spare tire well.
5. Replace the spare over the jack and secure with wing nut.
Stowing the flat tire
Utility:
1. Place the flat tire into the spare
tire well.
2. Secure the flat tire with the wing
nut.
Wheels and Tires 289
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sedan:
1. Insert the straight end of the jack retention
bracket through the eyelet of the angled bracket
and swing the retention bracket over the jack.
With the jack in place, place the end of the
retention bracket over the threaded stud in the
trunk floor and secure it with the plastic wing
nut.
2. Screw the extension bolt onto the threaded
stud of the jack retention bracket.
3. Place the flat tire in the spare tire
well with the wheel facing up.
4. Safely secure the wheel by
screwing the large wing nut onto
the extension bolt.
290 Wheels and Tires
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
size/bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20 110 149
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole (1) and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
Wheels and Tires 291
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 3.5L V6 engine
3.5L V6
EcoBoost™
engine
3.7L V6 engine
Cubic inches 214 214 227
Required fuel
Minimum
87 octane or
Ethanol (E-85)
Minimum
87 octane
Minimum
87 octane or
Ethanol (E-85)
Firing order 1–4–2–5–3–6 1–4–2–5–3–6 1–4–2–5–3–6
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug
Spark plug gap
0.049-0.053 in.
(1.25-1.35 mm)
0.033–0.037 in.
(.84–.94 mm)
0.049-0.053 in.
(1.25-1.35 mm)
Compression
ratio
10.8:1 10.0:1 10.5:1
Engine drivebelt routing
3.5L/3.7L V6 engines
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine (except
vehicles with electric power assisted
steering).
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine
292 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Brake fluid
1
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft威 DOT4LV
High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20 /
WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO
4925 Class 6
Door latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch,
seat tracks, trunk and
liftgate latches
—
Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESA-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft威 Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Automatic transmission
fluid
2,3
10.9 quarts
(10.3L)
(6F50)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
11.6 quarts
(11.0L)
(6F55)
Rear differential fluid 2.4 pints (1.15L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Sedan
Power Transfer Unit
fluid (AWD)
4
18 ounces (0.53L)
Motorcraft威 SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
X Y-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Utility
Power Transfer Unit
fluid (4WD)
4
12 ounces (0.35L)
Capacities and Specifications 293
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Engine oil
5,6
3.5L V6 engine
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
3.7L V6 engine
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W-20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20- LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A and API
Certification Mark
3.5L V6
EcoBoost™
engine
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
•XO-5W30-QSP (US)
•XO-5W30-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W30-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W30-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C946-A with API
Certification Mark
294 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Engine coolant
7
(3.5L V6/3.7L
V6 engines)
11.5 quarts
(10.9L)
Motorcraft威 Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
•VC-3DIL-B (US)
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
(3.5L V6
EcoBoost™engine)
11.8 quarts
(11.2L)
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Fuel tank
Sedan
19.0 gallons (72L)
Utility
18.6 gallons (70L)
——
1
Use only Motorcraft威 DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting
WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
3
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer
to scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any
fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
Capacities and Specifications 295
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A (3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine) or WSS-M2C945
-A (3.5L/3.7L V6 engines) and display the API Certification Mark.
6
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
7
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
296 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Motorcraft part numbers
Component
3.5L V6
engine
3.5L V6
EcoBoost™
engine
3.7L V6 engine
Air filter
element
FA-1884 FA-1884 FA-1884
Battery BXT-59 BXT-65-650 BXT-59
Oil filter FL-500-S FL-500-S FL-500-S
Spark plugs SP-520
1
SP-528
1
SP-520
1
Cabin air filter FP68 FP68 FP68
Windshield
wiper blade
Sedan
WW-2601-PF (driver side)
WW-2001-PF (passenger side)
Utility
WW-2206-PF (driver side)
WW-2600-PF (passenger side)
1
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or equivalent
replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage
to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
Capacities and Specifications 297
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
6-speed automatic transmission (6F50) J
6-speed automatic transmission (6F55) C
Capacities and Specifications 299
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind” protection
beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
300 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Ford Extended Service Plan 303
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians, have received. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and
built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer
develops these systems using different specifications and performance
features. That’s why it’s important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft威 and Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts branded replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12,000 mile (20,000 km) parts and labor limited
warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet
Ford specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions
compliance.
304 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ (IOLM)
system which displays a message in the message center at the proper oil
change service interval; this interval may be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the message center display, it’s time for
an oil change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ must
be reset after each oil change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft威 or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement for parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Scheduled Maintenance 305
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s) Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires for wear and proper pressure,
including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and
window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance 307
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
308 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
312 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 313
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
314 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or
within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing in the message center.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Scheduled Maintenance 315
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as
in heavy commercial use (i.e. delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty
roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Perform multi-point inspection
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel
316 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Police Interceptor equipped with engine idle hour meter
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the brake system
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months or as
indicated by
time/mileage
calculation
Change engine oil and filter (see description
below)
Perform multi-point inspection
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Scheduled Maintenance 317
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE IDLE HOUR METER (IF EQUIPPED):
Your vehicle may be equipped with an idle meter to indicate how much
time the vehicle is idling in P (Park) or N (Neutral). The meter is
incorporated with the vehicle odometer. Depressing the odometer-reset
button once will display the trip odometer (miles [km] followed by a “T”
for trip odometer); depressing the odometer-reset button a second time
will display the idle meter (hours followed by an “H” for hours). The idle
meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral). Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle. It cannot be
reset to zero. Police/Fleet vehicles often experience long periods of
idling, during which engine oil will continue to break down but distance
is not accumulated on the odometer.
To assist fleet managers in maintaining proper oil change intervals, the
idle meter will help determine when an oil change is required. For every
hour that the vehicle idles, it has accumulated the equivalent of
approximately 33 miles (53 km) of driving. Using the combination of the
vehicle odometer and idle meter allows the fleet manager to better
determine when the oil needs to be changed
Engine idle hour meter calculation:
Idle hours x 33 = miles (km) equivalency
Miles (km) driven + miles (km) equivalency = oil change interval
Example: When the odometer has accumulated 3,000 miles (4,800 km)
and the idle meter shows 61 hours, a 5,000 mile (8,000 km) oil change
interval will have been reached: 3,000 road miles (4,800 road km) + (61
idle hours x 33 miles [53 km]/idle hour) = 5,013 miles (8,067 km).
318 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 319
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
320 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
There are some exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They are listed
below:
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
If the available API “SM” or “SN” oils are not available, then the oil
change service interval is 3,000 mile (4,800 km).
Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter and
cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Scheduled Maintenance 321
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
322 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC威 is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls
• Access and play music from your portable music player
• Use 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped)
• Use applications such as Pandora and Stitcher via SYNC威 AppLink™
(if applicable)
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands
• Stream music from your connected phone
• Text message
• Use the advanced voice recognition system
• USB device charging (if your device supports this)
SYNC姞 323
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using it with
SYNC威.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC, do not:
• Operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and cables where they cannot be
stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Leave playing devices in the vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. Refer to your device’s user guide for further
information.
• Attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized dealer.
324 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC威, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes
of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may
be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may
occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain
in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in the
vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no
longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC威 module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada
will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist™ (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
SYNC姞 325
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING YOUR VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front
of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and “Listening” appears in
the display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.*
“Mobile Apps” Access mobile applications.*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*If equipped, U.S. only
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
326 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your
request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”) If
turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
SYNC姞 327
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise
from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from
correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
“Listening” appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
PHONE FEATURES
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID
Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, refer to your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC威 can support downloading up to approximately 2,000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in P (Park).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
328 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Add Bluetooth Device appears, press OK.
3. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
4. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. Refer to your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
5. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
6. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
7. Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system
may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as
the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in P (Park).
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. Refer to your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
SYNC姞 329
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
1
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
1
“Call <name> on other”
1
“Phone book <name> at home”
2
“Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell”
2
“Call history outgoing”
2
“Phone book <name> on Other”
2
“Call history missed”
2
“Menu”
2,3
“Join”
“Call <name> at home”
1
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
1
“Dial”
1,4
“Phone book <name>”
2
“Phone book <name> at work” OR “Phone book <name> at office”
2
“Call history incoming”
2
“Connections”
2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1
These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
2
These commands are not available until phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below
4
See “DIAL” table below
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”*
330 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“MENU”
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC威 to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one), etc.
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” “/” (pound, slash)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
SYNC姞 331
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call <name>” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: You can:
Mute Call?
Mute the call.
Privacy
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The
display indicates In Privacy and the system
transfers your call.)
Call Hold
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Hold on/off appears. To
answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.
332 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Enter Tones
Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Join Calls
Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Phonebook
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Call History
Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your
call history options (incoming, outgoing or
missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC姞 333
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features such as 911
Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Phone Redial
Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Call History
1
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC (if
the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
Phonebook
1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
334 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and the
message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
• Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
• Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
336 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, “Unsupported” appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
Pre-defined text message options
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Call me
Call you later
Can’t talk right now
Can’t wait to see you
I love you
I need more directions
I’m stuck in traffic
No
Thanks
Too funny
Where R you?
Why?
Yes
9. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system now
needs to know who to send the message to.
10. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
11. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
12. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each text
message is sent with the following signature: “This message was sent
from my <Ford or Lincoln>”.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
SYNC姞 337
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer
Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer
1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
338 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e.
add, delete, download). Press OK to select
and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. “Push” the desired
contact(s) on your phone. Refer to your
phone’s user guide on how to ’push’ contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC姞 339
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as “primary” as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
1
Pair additional phones to the system.
1. Press OK to select, then again when Find
SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display,
enter the six-digit PIN provided by SYNC.
4. When Set As Primary Phone? appears,
press OK. Scroll to toggle between Yes and
No, then press OK.
5. Depending on the functionality of your
phone, you may be asked additional questions
(i.e. if you would like to download your
phonebook). Scroll and use OK to select your
responses.
340 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Prompts
Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages
Choose between English, Francais and
Espanol. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that the
system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
342 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
911 Assist™
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist™ setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist™ to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately
to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist™ within five
seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
collision. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist™ from working
properly.
Note: SYNC威 911 Assist™ feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911
Assist™ privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist™ is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist™ is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC威 911 Assist™ works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist™, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, refer to the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, refer to the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
344 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting 911 Assist™ On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. Set
On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off
with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display reminder only
without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist™ works properly:
• SYNC威 must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC威 911 Assist™ feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC威.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist™); however, if 911 Assist™ is
triggered, SYNC威 tries to contact emergency services. If a connected
phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC威, SYNC威 searches for,
and tries to connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to
make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•
SYNC威 provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC威 attempting to dial 911.
• SYNC威 says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC威 will attempt
to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press
and hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
SYNC姞 345
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist™ May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist™ hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist™ Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist™ is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that
the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist™ may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle
or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use.
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription
associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this
feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
346 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer
To run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds):
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Press OK to select
and enter the menu.
Scroll to select from:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
or off. Select “On” to have SYNC automatically
prompt you to run a health report at certain
mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5,000, 7,500 or 10,000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
SYNC姞 347
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report options
Run Report Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
un-serviced vehicle inspection items from
your authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic
information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health
Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford may use the
vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature or
set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. Refer to
www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and
Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC姞 Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC威 Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC威 Services. Refer to the
Phone features for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
348 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC威 Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC威 Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS
technology and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you
personalized traffic reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more. For a complete list of services,
or to learn more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC姞 Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC威 Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you’re connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC姞 Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC威 initiates the call to the services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6. To return to the services menu, say “Services” or for help, say “Help”.
SYNC姞 349
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
Search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location just say “Business Search” and then “Search Near
Me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call
is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual driving
instructions as you travel towards you destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route Summary” or
“Route Status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
Disconnecting from SYNC姞 Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Goodbye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Personalizing You can personalize your services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as, work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. To
learn more, log onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
350 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“USB”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play song <name>”
1
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Refine album <name>”
1,3
“Refine artist <name>”
1,3
“Refine song <name>”
1
“Refine track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album <name>”
1,3
“Search artist <name>”
1,3
“Search genre <name>”
1,3
“Search song <name>”
1
“Search track <name>”
1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of
any desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode. For more
information, refer to Exploring the USB device later in this chapter.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
SYNC姞 353
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice Command Guide
“Autoplay” Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music” The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
Artist/Track/Album”
The system searches for a specific
artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
“Refine” This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
354 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you
select:
You can:
Play Menu
Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlists, tracks,
similar music or to simply, play all. You can also choose to
Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your
playing device.
Refer to Play Menu later in this section for more information.
Select
Source
Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input jack
(line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Press OK to select, then scroll to choose from:
USB: Press OK to access music plugged into your USB port.
You can also plug in devices to charge them (if supported by
your device). Once connected, the system indexes any
readable media files. (The time required to complete this
depends on the size of the media content being indexed.) If
Autoplay is on, you can access media files randomly as they
are indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not available until
the indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing
thousands of average size media and notifies you if the
maximum indexing file size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio
: This is a phone-dependent feature
which allows you to stream music playing on your
Bluetooth-enabled phone. If supported by your device, you
can press SEEK to play the previous or next track.
Line in
: Press OK to select and play music from your
portable music player over the vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device to the USB
port, you cannot access the line in feature. Some digital
media players require both USB and line in ports to
stream data and music separately.
SYNC姞 355
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you
select:
You can:
Media
Settings
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your
Autoplay settings. Once these selections are turned on, they
remain on until turned off.
Note: Some digital media players require both USB and line in
ports to stream data and music separately. Press OK to select
and then scroll to choose from:
Shuffle
: Press OK to shuffle available media files in the
current playlist. Note: To shuffle all media tracks, you
must select Play All in the Play Menu and then select
Shuffle.
Repeat
: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay
: Press OK to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing process.
Press SEEK to play the previous or next track.
Mobile
Apps
Interact with SYNC威-capable mobile applications on your smart
phone. Refer to SYNC威 AppLink™ earlier in this chapter for
more information.
System
Settings
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as
primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu listings
(prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install application
and system information).
Note: Refer to System Settings for more information.
Exit Media
Menu
Press OK to exit the media menu.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
356 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Play all Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing
device in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical
order.
Press OK to select. The first track title appears in
the display.
Artists
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected,
the system lists and then play all artists and
tracks alphabetically. If there are less than
255 indexed artist, they are listed alphabetically in
flat file mode. If there are more, they are
categorized in alphabetical categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All
Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
Albums
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are less
than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more,
they are organized into alphabetical categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select
from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
Genres
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select the
desired genre and press OK.
SYNC姞 357
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats such as ASX,
.M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists your
playlists alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more than 255, they are organized into
alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Tracks
Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more
than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them into
alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your media
device connected to the USB port. You can only
view media content which is compatible with
SYNC; other files saved are not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore indexed
media on your flash drive.
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata
information of each song to compile a playlist for
you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new list
of similar songs and begin playing. The metadata
tags must be populated for this feature to include
each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks won’t
be available in voice recognition, play menu or
similar music. However, if you place these tracks
onto your playing device in “Mass Storage Device
Mode”, they are available in voice recognition,
play menu browsing and similar music. Unknowns
are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag.
Return
Exit the current menu.
358 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
1
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
SYNC姞 359
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Delete Device
Delete a paired media device.
Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press
OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
1
This is a speed-dependent feature
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Prompts
Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
360 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Master Reset
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Application Download new software applications (if
available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port. Refer to
the web site for more information.
Return
Exit the current menu.
Troubleshooting
Your SYNC威 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise,
please refer to the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an on-line chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
A lot of
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
SYNC姞 361
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
This is a phone
dependent
feature, OR
Possible phone
malfunction.
Go to the website to review your
phone’s compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
Try “pushing” your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
Use the “SYNCmyphone” feature
available on the website.
The system says
“Phonebook
Downloaded” but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
Try “pushing” your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or special
ring tones associated with the
missing contact.
362 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB/Media issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I’m having trouble
connecting my
device.
Possible device
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
turn on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving
the device in your vehicle during
very hot or cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
This is a phone
dependent
feature, OR
The device is not
connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your
device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
The file may be
corrupted, OR
The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
Make sure that all song details
are populated.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
364 SYNC姞
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report/Services
(Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
Your account may
not be activated
on the website,
OR
You may have the
wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I’m unable to
retrieve the
report on the
website, or I
receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer
information did
not load correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer.
If one is already listed, try
selecting another dealer and
logging out. Log back in and
change it back to your preferred
dealer and retrieve the report.
I’m unable to
submit a report.
This could be due
to your phone’s
compatibility, OR
Bad signal
strength, OR
Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has been
turned up.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when
I tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
The phone in use
is not activated,
OR
Your phone has
ID blocker active.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same
one that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
SYNC姞 365
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
You may be using
the wrong voice
commands, OR
You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
Contacts in your
phonebook may
be very short and
similar, or they
may contain
special
characters, OR
Your phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if a contact
is saved as Joe Wilson, say “Call
Joe Wilson”.
The system works better if you
list full names such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE as the
system does not recognize them.
If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “ Call
J-A-K-E.”
SYNC姞 367
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
Appendices 369
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded
to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
370 Appendices
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers.
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed
materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as
well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
372 Appendices
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
End user notice
Microsoft姞 Windows姞 Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide can
lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system
settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these
operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some
functions you might be required to distract your attention away from
the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
Appendices 373
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged
attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if
your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical
time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
374 Appendices
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
Appendices 375
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................344
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................154
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............332
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................355
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................334
Accessory delay ..........................90
Active call menu options .........332
Advanced menu options ...342, 360
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................342
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................48
and child safety seats ..............49
description ................................48
disposal ......................................63
driver airbag ..............................48
passenger airbag .......................48
side airbag ...........................48, 52
Air cleaner filter .......233–234, 297
Air conditioning ........................118
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...............118
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................146
Ambulance packages ..................15
Anti-lock brake system (see
Brakes) ......................................154
Anti-theft system
arming the system ....................74
disarming a triggered system
...74
Audio system
Single CD ................................112
Audio system (see Radio) .......112
Automatic transmission ............144
fluid, adding ............................227
fluid, checking ........................227
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
fluid, specification ..................293
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
...116
Auxiliary powerpoint ................127
B
Battery .......................................230
acid, treating emergencies .....230
jumping a disabled battery ....194
maintenance-free ....................230
replacement, specifications ...297
servicing ..................................230
Blind Spot Information
System .......................................165
Booster seats ...............................22
Brakes ........................................153
anti-lock ...................................154
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................154
brake warning light ................154
fluid, checking and adding ....229
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
fluid, specifications .................293
lubricant specifications ..........293
parking ....................................154
trailer .......................................183
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....293
Cargo management system ......172
376 Index
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CD ..............................................112
CD player ..................................110
Cell phone use ............................15
Changing a tire .........................283
Child safety restraints ..........28, 31
Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....31
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................38
LATCH .......................................28
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................22
Cleaning your vehicle ...............248
engine compartment ..............250
instrument panel ....................252
interior .....................................251
plastic parts ............................249
washing ....................................248
waxing .....................................250
wheels ......................................253
wiper blades ............................251
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ..........118
Clock ..........................................112
Console ......................................128
overhead ..................................129
Coolant
checking and adding ..............222
refill capacities ........................293
specifications ..........................293
Cross Traffic Alert ....................165
Cruise control ...........................163
Customer Assistance ................192
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................300, 303
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................201
Getting roadside assistance ...192
Getting the service you
need .........................................197
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................203
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................201
D
Defrost .......................................118
rear window ............................119
Dipstick
automatic transmission fluid
...227
engine oil .................................221
Driving under special
conditions ..................145, 148, 150
sand .........................................149
snow and ice ...........................151
through water .................150, 189
E
Electronic message center .......100
Electronic stability control ......157
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................194
running out of fuel .................137
Emergency brake (see Parking
brake) ........................................154
Emission control system ..........141
End user license agreement ....368
Engine ........................................292
cleaning ...................................250
fail-safe cooling .......................225
idle speed control ...................230
lubrication specifications .......293
refill capacities ........................293
service points ..........................219
Index 377
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine block heater .................133
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............221
dipstick ....................................221
filter, specifications ................297
refill capacities ........................293
specifications ..........................293
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................133
F
Fail safe cooling ........................225
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....135
Floor mats .................................190
Fluid capacities .........................293
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................147
Fuel
cap ...........................................139
capacity ...................................293
choosing the right fuel ...........136
filler funnel .............................137
filling your vehicle with fuel
...139
filter, specifications ........229, 297
fuel pump shut-off ..................194
octane rating ...................137, 292
quality ......................................136
running out of fuel .................137
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................135
Fuel and distance computer ....102
outside temperature
indicator ..................................102
to empty indicator ..................102
trip distance ............................102
trip/reset button .....................102
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................135
Fuses ..................................205–206
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............139
Gauges .........................................95
odometer .................................102
trip odometer ..........................102
H
Hazard flashers .........................193
Headlamps
aiming ......................................235
bulb specifications ..................246
flash to pass ..............................83
high beam .................................82
replacing bulbs .......................237
Head restraints .........................122
Heating ......................................118
Hood ..........................................216
I
Ignition ...............................131, 292
Illuminated visor mirror .............93
Information displays .................100
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................143
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................252
cluster ........................................95
J
Jack ............................................283
positioning ...............................283
storage .....................................283
378 Index
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
R
Radio ..........................................112
Single CD ................................112
Radio reception .........................110
Rear view camera display ........160
Rear window defroster .............118
Receiving a text message .........336
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................24
Relays ................................205–206
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................70
locking/unlocking doors ...........69
opening the trunk .....................69
replacement/additional
transmitters ...............................66
replacing the batteries .............65
Reverse sensing system ...........159
Roadside assistance ..................192
Roll stability control .................157
Roof rack ...................................173
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............44
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..............................37, 40
Safety defects, reporting ..........204
Safety information ....................324
Safety restraints ..............37–38, 40
Belt-Minder威 .............................41
Belt-Minder威,
deactivating/activating .............43
extension assembly ..................40
for adults .............................37–38
for children .........................19, 24
Occupant Classification
Sensor ........................................50
safety belt maintenance ...........44
seat belt maintenance ..............44
warning light and chime ..........41
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ........................................28
Safety seats for children ......19, 24
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................299
Satellite Radio ...........................112
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............309
Seat belts (see Safety
restraints) ....................................37
Seats ..........................................125
child safety seats ................19, 24
front seats .......................123–124
second row seats ....................125
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........355
Setting the clock .......................112
Side air curtain ...........................54
Side-curtain airbags system .......54
SIRIUS威 satellite radio .............112
Snowplowing ...............................15
SOS Post Crash Alert .................47
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................292, 297
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............15
utility-type vehicles ..................15
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................293
380 Index
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Stability system .........................157
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......132
Starting your vehicle ........131–132
jump starting ..........................194
Steering wheel ............................75
controls ......................................76
tilting .........................................75
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................48
SYNC威 customer support .........324
SYNC威 Services .........................348
T
Temperature control (see
Climate control) ........................118
Text messaging .........................336
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....336, 338
Tilt steering wheel ......................75
Tires ...........................260–261, 283
alignment ................................274
care ..........................................260
changing ..........................283–284
checking the pressure ............270
inflating ...................................268
label .........................................267
police vehicles ........................276
replacing ..................................272
rotating ....................................275
safety practices .......................274
sidewall information ...............262
snow tires and chains ............277
terminology .............................261
tire grades ...............................261
treadwear ........................260, 270
Towing .......................182, 185–186
recreational towing .................186
trailer towing ..........................182
wrecker ....................................185
Traction control ........................155
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................348
Transaxle
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
lubricant specifications ..........293
Transmission
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................227
Trunk .....................................71–72
remote release ..........................69
Turn signal ..................................85
U
USB port ....................................117
Using privacy mode ..................332
V
Vehicle health report ................346
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................298
Vehicle loading ..........................174
Ventilating your vehicle ...........133
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................352
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................330
W
Warning lights
(see Lights) .................................95
Washer fluid ..............................230
Index 381
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Water, Driving through .............189
Windows
power .........................................89
rear wiper/washer .....................80
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................79
checking and adding fluid .....230
replacing wiper blades ...232–233
Wrecker towing .........................185
382 Index
2013 Police (pol)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
